PR ld/14357
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
794e51c0 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1261command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1263input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1269libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1270mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1271their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1273the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1274dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
30824704
RM
1403@kindex --print-output-format
1404@cindex output format
1405@item --print-output-format
1406Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1407other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1408in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1409
252b5132
RH
1410@cindex help
1411@cindex usage
1412@kindex --help
1413@item --help
1414Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1415
ea20a7da
CC
1416@kindex --target-help
1417@item --target-help
1418Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1419
2509a395
SL
1420@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1421@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1422Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1423@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1424
1425@cindex memory usage
1426@kindex --no-keep-memory
1427@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1428@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1429symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1430instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1431necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1432while linking a large executable.
1433
1434@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1435@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1436@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1437@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1438Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1439is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1440The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1441behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1442libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1443
aa713662
L
1444@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1445@kindex -z muldefs
1446@item --allow-multiple-definition
1447@itemx -z muldefs
1448Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1449report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1450first definition will be used.
1451
b79e8c78 1452@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1453@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1454@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1455@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1456Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1457This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1458determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1459shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1460how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1461
903249d7
NC
1462The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1463referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1464an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1465a shared library.
1466
1467The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1468libraries specified at link time are that:
1469
1470@itemize @bullet
1471@item
1472A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1473that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1474resolvable at load time.
1475@item
1476There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1477symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1478
1479The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1480select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1481architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1482appropriate memset function.
1483@end itemize
b79e8c78 1484
31941635
L
1485@kindex --no-undefined-version
1486@item --no-undefined-version
1487Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1488it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1489will be issued instead.
1490
3e3b46e5
PB
1491@kindex --default-symver
1492@item --default-symver
1493Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1494exported symbols.
1495
1496@kindex --default-imported-symver
1497@item --default-imported-symver
1498Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1499imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1500
252b5132
RH
1501@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1502@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1503Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1504files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1505been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1506This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1507errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1508have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1509inappropriate.
1510
fe7929ce
AM
1511@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1512@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1513Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1514library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1515
252b5132
RH
1516@kindex --no-whole-archive
1517@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1518Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1519archive files.
1520
1521@cindex output file after errors
1522@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1523@item --noinhibit-exec
1524Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1525Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1526errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1527when it issues any error whatsoever.
1528
0a9c1c8e
CD
1529@kindex -nostdlib
1530@item -nostdlib
1531Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1532command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1533(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1534
252b5132 1535@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1536@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1537@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1538@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1539file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1540@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1541object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1542object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1543should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1544usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1545name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1546list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1547command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1548this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1549@end ifclear
1550
36af4a4e
JJ
1551@kindex -pie
1552@kindex --pic-executable
1553@item -pie
1554@itemx --pic-executable
1555@cindex position independent executables
1556Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1557ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1558libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1559address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1560normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1561defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1562
252b5132
RH
1563@kindex -qmagic
1564@item -qmagic
1565This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1566
1567@kindex -Qy
1568@item -Qy
1569This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1570
1571@kindex --relax
1572@cindex synthesizing linker
1573@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1574@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1575@item --relax
28d5f677 1576@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1577An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1578@ifset GENERIC
1579This option is only supported on a few targets.
1580@end ifset
1581@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1582@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1583@end ifset
1584@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1585@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1586@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1587@ifset XTENSA
1588@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1589@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1590@ifset M68HC11
1591@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1592@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1593@ifset POWERPC
1594@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1595@end ifset
252b5132 1596
28d5f677
NC
1597On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1598global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1599addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1600synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1601instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1602
1603On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1604debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1605@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1606This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1607family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1608@end ifset
1609
1610@ifset GENERIC
1611On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1612but ignored.
1613@end ifset
1614
28d5f677
NC
1615On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1616@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1617
252b5132
RH
1618@cindex retaining specified symbols
1619@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1620@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1621@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1622@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1623Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1624discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1625symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1626@ifset GENERIC
1627(such as VxWorks)
1628@end ifset
1629where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1630run-time memory.
1631
1632@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1633or symbols needed for relocations.
1634
1635You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1636line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1637
1638@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1639@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1640@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1641@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1642Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1643linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1644arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1645them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1646also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1647objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1648@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1649ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1650@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1651
ff5dcc92 1652The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1653SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1654@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1655runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1656options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1657gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1658file systems.
252b5132 1659
ff5dcc92 1660For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1661followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1662the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1663@end ifset
1664
1665@ifset GENERIC
1666@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1667@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1668@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1669When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1670happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1671of the input files.
1672
1673When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1674non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1675shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1676explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1677specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1678@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1679either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1680appearing multiple times.
1681
28c309a2
NC
1682This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1683that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1684is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1685runtime linker would do.
1686
252b5132 1687The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1688libraries:
252b5132
RH
1689@enumerate
1690@item
ff5dcc92 1691Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1692@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1693Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1694between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1695specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1696used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1697at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1698by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1699the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1702@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1703environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1705On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1706directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1707@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1708For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1709variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1710@item
ec4eb78a
L
1711For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1712@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1713libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1714@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1715@item
252b5132
RH
1716The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1717@item
1718For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1719exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1720@end enumerate
1721
1722If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1723warning and continue with the link.
1724@end ifset
1725
1726@kindex -shared
1727@kindex -Bshareable
1728@item -shared
1729@itemx -Bshareable
1730@cindex shared libraries
1731Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1732and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1733shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1734undefined symbols in the link.
1735
252b5132 1736@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1737@item --sort-common
1738@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1739@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1740This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1741ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1742sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1743eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1744between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1745specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1746
2509a395
SL
1747@kindex --sort-section=name
1748@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1749This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1750patterns in the linker script.
1751
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1753@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1754This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1755patterns in the linker script.
1756
252b5132 1757@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1759Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1760each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1761size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1762
1763@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1764@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1765Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1766output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1767This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1768certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1769cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1770that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1771support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1772input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1773more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1774many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1775
1776@kindex --stats
1777@item --stats
1778Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1779as execution time and memory usage.
1780
2509a395 1781@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1782@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1783Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1784configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1785that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1786
252b5132
RH
1787@kindex --traditional-format
1788@cindex traditional format
1789@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1790For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1791the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1792use the traditional format instead.
1793
1794@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1795For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1796symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1797full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1798@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1799trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1800combine duplicate entries.
1801
2509a395
SL
1802@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1803@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1804Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1805address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1806times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1807line.
1808@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1809for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1810@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1811should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1812sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1813
2509a395
SL
1814@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1815@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1816@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1817@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1818@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1819@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1820@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1821Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1822@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1823
2509a395
SL
1824@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1825@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1826@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1827When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1828of the first byte of the text segment.
1829
560e09e9
NC
1830@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1831@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1832Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1833values for @samp{method}:
1834
1835@table @samp
1836@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1837Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1838
1839@item report-all
da8bce14 1840Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1841
1842@item ignore-in-object-files
1843Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1844ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1845
1846@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1847Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1848ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1849when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1850libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1851command line.
1852@end table
1853
1854The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1855by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1856
1857Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1858unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1859can change this to a warning.
1860
1715a13c
L
1861@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1862@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1863@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1864@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1865Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1866supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1867the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1868argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1869
1870@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1871@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1872@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1873Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1874used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1875about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1876is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1877see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1878use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1879symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1880@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1881
7ce691ae 1882@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1883@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1884@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1885@item --warn-common
1886Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1887a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1888but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1889you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1890Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1891warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1892
1893There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1894
1895@table @samp
1896@item int i = 1;
1897A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1898file.
1899
1900@item extern int i;
1901An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1902There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1903variable somewhere.
1904
1905@item int i;
1906A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1907variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1908The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1909single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1910size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1911a definition of the same variable.
1912@end table
1913
1914The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1915Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1916just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1917encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1918a common symbol.
1919
1920@enumerate
1921@item
1922Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1923definition for the symbol.
1924@smallexample
1925@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1926 overridden by definition
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1928@end smallexample
1929
1930@item
1931Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1932the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1933except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1936 overriding common
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1944 of `@var{symbol}'
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1950@smallexample
1951@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1952 overridden by larger common
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1954@end smallexample
1955
1956@item
1957Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1958the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1959encountered in a different order.
1960@smallexample
1961@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1962 overriding smaller common
1963@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1964@end smallexample
1965@end enumerate
1966
1967@kindex --warn-constructors
1968@item --warn-constructors
1969Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1970object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1971detect the use of global constructors.
1972
1973@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1974@item --warn-multiple-gp
1975Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1976This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1977Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1978section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1979of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1980base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1981base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1982bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1983large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1984values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1985option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-once
1988@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1989@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1990@item --warn-once
1991Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1992which refers to it.
1993
1994@kindex --warn-section-align
1995@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1996@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1997@item --warn-section-align
1998Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1999alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2000The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2001is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2002the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2003
8fdd7217
NC
2004@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2005@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2006Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2007
a0c402a5
L
2008@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2009@item --warn-alternate-em
2010Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2011
560e09e9
NC
2012@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2014If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2015@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2016This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2017
2018@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2019@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2020This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2021it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2022
252b5132
RH
2023@kindex --whole-archive
2024@cindex including an entire archive
2025@item --whole-archive
2026For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2027@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2028in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2029files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2030library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2031library. This option may be used more than once.
2032
7ec229ce 2033Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2034about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2035Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2036list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2037your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2038
2509a395
SL
2039@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2040@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2041Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2042@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2043undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2044@var{symbol}.
2045
2046This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2047wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2048wishes to call the system function, it should call
2049@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2050
2051Here is a trivial example:
2052
2053@smallexample
2054void *
cc2f008e 2055__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2056@{
cc2f008e 2057 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2058 return __real_malloc (c);
2059@}
2060@end smallexample
2061
ff5dcc92 2062If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2063all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2064instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2065call the real @code{malloc} function.
2066
2067You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2068links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2069you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2070file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2071call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2072
6aa29e7b
JJ
2073@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2074@item --eh-frame-hdr
2075Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2076@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2077
e41b3a13
JJ
2078@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2079@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2080Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2081generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2082if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2083
6c1439be
L
2084@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2085@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2086@item --enable-new-dtags
2087@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2088This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2089systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2090@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2091If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2092created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2093those options are only available for ELF systems.
2094
2d643429 2095@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2096@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2097Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2098close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2099time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2100increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2101value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2102
fdc90cb4
JJ
2103@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2104@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2105Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2106@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2107new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2108the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2109hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2110
35835446
JR
2111@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2112@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2113This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2114linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2115for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2116about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2117
4f9c04f7 2118Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21191021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2120run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2121has been used.
2122
2123The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2124enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2125
c0065db7
RM
2126@kindex --build-id
2127@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2128@item --build-id
2129@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2130Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2131The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2132file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2133@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2134parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2135@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2136@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2137an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2138characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2139omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2140
2141The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2142that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2143unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2144to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2145file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2146string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2147
2148Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2149@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2150@end table
2151
0285c67d
NC
2152@c man end
2153
36f63dca 2154@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2155
0285c67d
NC
2156@c man begin OPTIONS
2157
ff5dcc92 2158The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2159the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2160normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2161use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2162@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2163like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2164symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2165object file).
2166
2167In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2168support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2169PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2170values by either a space or an equals sign.
2171
ff5dcc92 2172@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2175@item --add-stdcall-alias
2176If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2177as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2179
2180@kindex --base-file
2181@item --base-file @var{file}
2182Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2183addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2184@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2185[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@kindex --dll
2188@item --dll
2189Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2190@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2191file.
bb10df36 2192[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2193
88183869
DK
2194@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2195@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2196@item --enable-long-section-names
2197@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2198The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2199the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2200for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2201fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2202to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2203allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2204disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2205generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2206as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2207with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2208GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2209information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2210option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2211section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2212when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2213image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2214[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2215
252b5132
RH
2216@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2217@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2218@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2219@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2220If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2221do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2222only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2223resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2224undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2225@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2226to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2227warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2228import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2229to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2230feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2231@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2232mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2233[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2234
522f09cd
KT
2235@kindex --leading-underscore
2236@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2237@item --leading-underscore
2238@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2239For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2240in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2241disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2242
252b5132
RH
2243@cindex DLLs, creating
2244@kindex --export-all-symbols
2245@item --export-all-symbols
2246If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2247be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2248otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2249explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2250attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2251option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2252@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2253@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2254exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2255re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2256such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2257@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2258@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2259Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2260not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2261extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2262(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2263These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2264@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2265@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2266@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2267@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2269
2270@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2271@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2272Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2273exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2274[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2275
2927aaca
NC
2276@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2277@item --exclude-all-symbols
2278Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2279[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2280
252b5132
RH
2281@kindex --file-alignment
2282@item --file-alignment
2283Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2284file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2285512.
bb10df36 2286[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2287
2288@cindex heap size
2289@kindex --heap
2290@item --heap @var{reserve}
2291@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2292Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2293to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2294committed.
bb10df36 2295[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2296
2297@cindex image base
2298@kindex --image-base
2299@item --image-base @var{value}
2300Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2301the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2302is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2303your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2304other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2305for dlls.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2307
2308@kindex --kill-at
2309@item --kill-at
2310If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2311symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2313
26d2d8a2
BF
2314@kindex --large-address-aware
2315@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2316If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2317header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2318greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2319or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2320section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2321[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2322
252b5132
RH
2323@kindex --major-image-version
2324@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2325Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2326[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2327
2328@kindex --major-os-version
2329@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2330Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2331[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2332
2333@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2334@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2335Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2336[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2337
2338@kindex --minor-image-version
2339@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2340Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2342
2343@kindex --minor-os-version
2344@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2345Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2346[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2347
2348@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2349@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2350Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2352
2353@cindex DEF files, creating
2354@cindex DLLs, creating
2355@kindex --output-def
2356@item --output-def @var{file}
2357The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2358file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2359(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2360library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2361automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2363
b044cda1
CW
2364@cindex DLLs, creating
2365@kindex --out-implib
2366@item --out-implib @var{file}
2367The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2368import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2369import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2370may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2371makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2372creation step.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2374
2375@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2376@item --enable-auto-image-base
2377Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2378using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2379from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2380collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2381avoided.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2383
2384@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2385@item --disable-auto-image-base
2386Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2387user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2388default.
bb10df36 2389[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2390
2391@cindex DLLs, linking to
2392@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2393@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2394When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2395search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2396@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2397between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2398uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2399@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2400[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2401
2402@kindex --enable-auto-import
2403@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2404Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2405DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2406building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2407'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2408to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2409specification published by Microsoft.
2410
e2a83dd0
NC
2411Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2412data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2413placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2414around a problem with consts that is described here:
2415http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2416
4d8907ac
DS
2417Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2418see this message:
0d888aac 2419
ece2d90e 2420"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2421documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2422
ece2d90e
NC
2423This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2424ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2425allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2426fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2427constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2428multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2429this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2430of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2431the warning, and exit.
2432
2433There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2434data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2435
2fa9fc65
NC
2436One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2437of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2438this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2439
c0065db7
RM
2440A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2441that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2442there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2443a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2444
2445@example
2446extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2447extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2448 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2449@end example
2450
2451or
2452
2453@example
2454extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2455extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2456 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2457@end example
2458
c0065db7 2459For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2460is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2461
2462@example
2463extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2464extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2465 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2466@end example
2467
c406afaf
NC
2468or
2469
2470@example
2471extern long long extern_ll;
2472extern_ll -->
2473 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2474@end example
2475
2fa9fc65 2476A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2477'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2478@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2479requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2480building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2481merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2482between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2483constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2484
2485Original:
2486@example
2487--foo.h
2488extern int arr[];
2489--foo.c
2490#include "foo.h"
2491void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2492 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 1:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499extern int arr[];
2500--foo.c
2501#include "foo.h"
2502void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2503 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2504 volatile int *parr = arr;
2505 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2506@}
2507@end example
2508
2509Solution 2:
2510@example
2511--foo.h
2512/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2513#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2514 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2515#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2516#else
2517#define FOO_IMPORT
2518#endif
2519extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2520--foo.c
2521#include "foo.h"
2522void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2523 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2524@}
2525@end example
2526
c0065db7 2527A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2528library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2529for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2530functions).
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2532
2533@kindex --disable-auto-import
2534@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2535Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2536@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2537[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2538
2fa9fc65
NC
2539@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2540@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2541If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2542that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2543a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2544environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2545[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2546
2547@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2548@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2549Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2550DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2551[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2552
b044cda1
CW
2553@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2554@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2555Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2557
252b5132
RH
2558@kindex --section-alignment
2559@item --section-alignment
2560Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2561addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@cindex stack size
2565@kindex --stack
2566@item --stack @var{reserve}
2567@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2568Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2569to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2570committed.
bb10df36 2571[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2572
2573@kindex --subsystem
2574@item --subsystem @var{which}
2575@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2576@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2577Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2578legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2579@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2580the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2581@var{which}.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2583
2f563b51
DK
2584The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2585of the PE file header:
2586[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2587
2588@kindex --dynamicbase
2589@item --dynamicbase
2590The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2591randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2592Vista for i386 PE targets.
2593
2594@kindex --forceinteg
2595@item --forceinteg
2596Code integrity checks are enforced.
2597
2598@kindex --nxcompat
2599@item --nxcompat
2600The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2601This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2602
2603@kindex --no-isolation
2604@item --no-isolation
2605Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2606
2607@kindex --no-seh
2608@item --no-seh
2609The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2610this image.
2611
2612@kindex --no-bind
2613@item --no-bind
2614Do not bind this image.
2615
2616@kindex --wdmdriver
2617@item --wdmdriver
2618The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2619
2620@kindex --tsaware
2621@item --tsaware
2622The image is Terminal Server aware.
2623
252b5132
RH
2624@end table
2625
0285c67d
NC
2626@c man end
2627
ac145307
BS
2628@ifset C6X
2629@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2630
2631@c man begin OPTIONS
2632
2633The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2634libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2635all executables use an index of 0.
2636
2637@table @gcctabopt
2638
2639@kindex --dsbt-size
2640@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2641This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2642or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2643entries.
2644
2645@kindex --dsbt-index
2646@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2647This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2648to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2649executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2650@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2651
fbd9ad90
PB
2652@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2653The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2654exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2655
ac145307
BS
2656@end table
2657
2658@c man end
2659@end ifset
2660
93fd0973
SC
2661@ifset M68HC11
2662@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2663
2664@c man begin OPTIONS
2665
2666The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2667memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2668
2669@table @gcctabopt
2670
2671@kindex --no-trampoline
2672@item --no-trampoline
2673This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2674is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2675instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2676
2677@kindex --bank-window
2678@item --bank-window @var{name}
2679This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2680the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2681The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2682paging and addresses within the memory window.
2683
2684@end table
2685
2686@c man end
2687@end ifset
2688
7fb9f789
NC
2689@ifset M68K
2690@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2691
2692@c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2695when linking for 68K targets.
2696
2697@table @gcctabopt
2698
2699@kindex --got
2700@item --got=@var{type}
2701This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2702@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2703@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2704Info entry for @file{ld}.
2705
2706@end table
2707
2708@c man end
2709@end ifset
2710
252b5132
RH
2711@ifset UsesEnvVars
2712@node Environment
2713@section Environment Variables
2714
0285c67d
NC
2715@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2716
560e09e9 2717You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2718@ifclear SingleFormat
2719@code{GNUTARGET},
2720@end ifclear
2721@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2722
36f63dca 2723@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2724@kindex GNUTARGET
2725@cindex default input format
2726@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2727use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2728of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2729@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2730of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2731attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2732this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2733there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2734object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2735BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2736in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2737@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2738
2739@kindex LDEMULATION
2740@cindex default emulation
2741@cindex emulation, default
2742@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2743@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2744behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2745available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2746the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2747variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2748linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2751@cindex demangling, default
2752Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2753@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2754default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2755a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2756may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2757options.
2758
0285c67d
NC
2759@c man end
2760@end ifset
2761
252b5132
RH
2762@node Scripts
2763@chapter Linker Scripts
2764
2765@cindex scripts
2766@cindex linker scripts
2767@cindex command files
2768Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2769written in the linker command language.
2770
2771The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2772the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2773the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2774more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2775direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2776described below.
2777
2778The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2779yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2780linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2781to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2782such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2783
2784You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2785line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2786default linker script.
2787
2788You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2789to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2790Linker Scripts}.
2791
2792@menu
2793* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2794* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2795* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2796* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2797* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2798* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2799* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2800* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2801* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2802* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2803* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2804@end menu
2805
2806@node Basic Script Concepts
2807@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2808@cindex linker script concepts
2809We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2810describe the linker script language.
2811
2812The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2813file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2814@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2815The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2816purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2817among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2818section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2819in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2820
2821Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2822also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2823contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2824the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2825A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2826area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2827loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2828which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2829of debugging information.
2830
2831Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2832first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2833the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2834@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2835section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2836same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2837is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2838(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2839based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2840RAM address would be the VMA.
2841
2842You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2843program with the @samp{-h} option.
2844
2845Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2846@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2847has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2848information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2849will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2850static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2851referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2852
2853You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2854program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2855option.
2856
2857@node Script Format
2858@section Linker Script Format
2859@cindex linker script format
2860Linker scripts are text files.
2861
2862You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2863either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2864symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2865generally ignored.
2866
2867Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2868If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2869otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2870double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2871file name.
2872
2873You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2874@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2875to whitespace.
2876
2877@node Simple Example
2878@section Simple Linker Script Example
2879@cindex linker script example
2880@cindex example of linker script
2881Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2882
2883The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2884@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2885memory layout of the output file.
2886
2887The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2888describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2889code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2890@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2891Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2892your input files.
2893
2894For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28950x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2896linker script which will do that:
2897@smallexample
2898SECTIONS
2899@{
2900 . = 0x10000;
2901 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2902 . = 0x8000000;
2903 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2904 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2905@}
2906@end smallexample
2907
2908You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2909followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2910descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2911
252b5132
RH
2912The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2913sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2914counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2915other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2916current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2917incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2918@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2919
2920The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2921required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2922after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2923which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2924wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2925means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2926
2927Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2928@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2929@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2930
2931The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2932the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2933at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2934output section, the value of the location counter will be
2935@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2936effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2937immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2938
2939The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2940alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2941example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2942sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2943may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2944sections.
2945
2946That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2947
2948@node Simple Commands
2949@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2950@cindex linker script simple commands
2951In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2952
2953@menu
2954* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2955* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2956@ifclear SingleFormat
2957* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2958@end ifclear
2959
4a93e180 2960* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2961* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2962@end menu
2963
2964@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2965@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2966@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2967@cindex start of execution
2968@cindex first instruction
2969@cindex entry point
2970The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2971point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2972entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2973@smallexample
2974ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2975@end smallexample
2976
2977There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2978entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2979stopping when one of them succeeds:
2980@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2981@item
252b5132 2982the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2983@item
252b5132 2984the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2985@item
3ab904c4
NC
2986the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2987targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2988check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2989@item
252b5132 2990the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2991@item
252b5132
RH
2992The address @code{0}.
2993@end itemize
2994
2995@node File Commands
36f63dca 2996@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2997@cindex linker script file commands
2998Several linker script commands deal with files.
2999
3000@table @code
3001@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3002@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3003@cindex including a linker script
3004Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3005be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3006with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
300710 levels deep.
3008
4006703d
NS
3009You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3010@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3011
252b5132
RH
3012@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3013@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3014@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3015@cindex input files in linker scripts
3016@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3017@cindex linker script input object files
3018The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3019in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3020
3021For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3022a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3023then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3024
3025In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3026script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3027
e3f2db7f
AO
3028In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3029with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3030located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3031for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3032open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3033linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3034description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3035
ff5dcc92 3036If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3037name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3038@samp{-l}.
3039
3040When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3041files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3042script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3043
3044@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3045@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3046@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3047@cindex grouping input files
3048The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3049files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3050new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3051in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3052
b717d30e
JJ
3053@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3054@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3055@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3056This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3057commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3058as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3059with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3060when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3061@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3062and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3063setting afterwards.
3064
252b5132
RH
3065@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3066@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3067@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3068The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3069@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3070@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3071Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3072precedence.
3073
3074You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3075output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3076
3077@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3078@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3079@cindex library search path in linker script
3080@cindex archive search path in linker script
3081@cindex search path in linker script
3082The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3083@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3084@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3085on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3086are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3087the command line option are searched first.
3088
3089@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3090@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3091@cindex first input file
3092The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3093that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3094though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3095when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3096first file.
3097@end table
3098
3099@ifclear SingleFormat
3100@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3101@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3102A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3103
3104@table @code
3105@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3106@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3107@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3108@cindex output file format in linker script
3109The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3110output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3111exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3112(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3113line option takes precedence.
3114
3115You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3116formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3117This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3118desired endianness.
3119
3120If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3121will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3122output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3123used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3124
3125For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3126command:
3127@smallexample
3128OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3129@end smallexample
3130This says that the default format for the output file is
3131@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3132option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3133format.
3134
3135@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3136@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3137@cindex input file format in linker script
3138The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3139files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3140This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3141(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3142is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3143command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3144@end table
3145@end ifclear
3146
4a93e180
NC
3147@node REGION_ALIAS
3148@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3149@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3150@cindex region alias
3151@cindex region names
3152
3153Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3154@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3155
3156@smallexample
3157REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3158@end smallexample
3159
3160The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3161memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3162to memory regions. An example follows.
3163
3164Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3165memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3166that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3167non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3168access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3169read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3170sections:
3171
3172@itemize @bullet
3173@item
3174@code{.text} program code;
3175@item
3176@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3177@item
3178@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3179@item
3180@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3181@end itemize
3182
3183The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3184part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3185output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3186systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3187@code{C}:
3188@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3189@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3190@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3191@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3192@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3193@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3194@end multitable
3195The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3196loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3197the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3198the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3199
3200The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3201includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3202memory layout:
3203@smallexample
3204INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3205
3206SECTIONS
3207 @{
3208 .text :
3209 @{
3210 *(.text)
3211 @} > REGION_TEXT
3212 .rodata :
3213 @{
3214 *(.rodata)
3215 rodata_end = .;
3216 @} > REGION_RODATA
3217 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3218 @{
3219 data_start = .;
3220 *(.data)
3221 @} > REGION_DATA
3222 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3223 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3224 .bss :
3225 @{
3226 *(.bss)
3227 @} > REGION_BSS
3228 @}
3229@end smallexample
3230
3231Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3232regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3233variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3234@table @code
3235@item A
3236Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3237@smallexample
3238MEMORY
3239 @{
3240 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3241 @}
3242
3243REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3244REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3245REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3246REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3247@end smallexample
3248@item B
3249Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3250into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3251@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3252@smallexample
3253MEMORY
3254 @{
3255 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3256 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3257 @}
3258
3259REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3260REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3261REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3262REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3263@end smallexample
3264@item C
3265Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3266@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3267initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3268system start into the @code{RAM}.
3269@smallexample
3270MEMORY
3271 @{
3272 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3273 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3274 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3275 @}
3276
3277REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3278REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3279REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3280REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3281@end smallexample
3282@end table
3283
3284It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3285@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3286necessary:
3287@smallexample
3288#include <string.h>
3289
3290extern char data_start [];
3291extern char data_size [];
3292extern char data_load_start [];
3293
3294void copy_data(void)
3295@{
3296 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3297 @{
3298 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3299 @}
3300@}
3301@end smallexample
3302
252b5132 3303@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3304@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3305There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3306
3307@table @code
3308@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3309@kindex ASSERT
3310@cindex assertion in linker script
3311Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3312with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3313
3314@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3315@kindex EXTERN
3316@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3317Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3318symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3319modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3320each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3321command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3322
3323@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3324@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325@cindex common allocation in linker script
3326This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3327to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3328output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3329
4818e05f
AM
3330@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3331@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3332@cindex common allocation in linker script
3333This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3334command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3335to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3336
53d25da6
AM
3337@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3338@kindex INSERT
3339@cindex insert user script into default script
3340This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3341augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3342inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3343@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3344default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3345sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3346linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3347insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3348linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3349default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3350of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3351to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3352is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3353
3354@smallexample
3355SECTIONS
3356@{
3357 OVERLAY :
3358 @{
3359 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3360 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3361 @}
3362@}
3363INSERT AFTER .text;
3364@end smallexample
3365
252b5132
RH
3366@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3367@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3368@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3369This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3370references among certain output sections.
3371
3372In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3373using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3374will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3375errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3376a function defined in the other section.
3377
3378The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3379@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3380an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3381@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3382names.
3383
3384@ifclear SingleFormat
3385@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3386@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3387@cindex machine architecture
3388@cindex architecture
3389Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3390of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3391architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3392the @samp{-f} option.
3393@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3394
3395@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3396@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3397This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3398@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3399in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3400@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3401@end table
3402
3403@node Assignments
3404@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3405@cindex assignment in scripts
3406@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3407@cindex variables, defining
3408You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3409the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3410
3411@menu
3412* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3413* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3414* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3415* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3416@end menu
3417
3418@node Simple Assignments
3419@subsection Simple Assignments
3420
3421You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3422
3423@table @code
3424@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3425@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3426@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3427@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3428@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3429@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3430@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3431@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3432@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3433@end table
3434
3435The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3436@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3437defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3438
3439The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3440may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3441
3442The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3443
3444Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3445
3446You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3447statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3448section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3449
3450The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3451expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3452
3453Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3454assignments may be used:
3455
3456@smallexample
3457floating_point = 0;
3458SECTIONS
3459@{
3460 .text :
3461 @{
3462 *(.text)
3463 _etext = .;
3464 @}
156e34dd 3465 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3466 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3467@}
3468@end smallexample
3469@noindent
3470In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3471zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3472the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3473defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3474upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3475
3476@node PROVIDE
3477@subsection PROVIDE
3478@cindex PROVIDE
3479In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3480only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3481the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3482@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3483@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3484@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3485@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3486@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3487
3488Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3489@smallexample
3490SECTIONS
3491@{
3492 .text :
3493 @{
3494 *(.text)
3495 _etext = .;
3496 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3497 @}
3498@}
3499@end smallexample
3500
3501In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3502underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3503the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3504underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3505If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3506linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3507
7af8e998
L
3508@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3509@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3510@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3511Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3512hidden and won't be exported.
3513
73ae6183
NC
3514@node Source Code Reference
3515@subsection Source Code Reference
3516
3517Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3518intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3519a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3520symbol that does not have a value.
3521
3522Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3523transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3524stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3525prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3526mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3527of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3528variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3529linker script variable might be referred to as:
3530
3531@smallexample
3532 extern int foo;
3533@end smallexample
3534
3535But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3536
3537@smallexample
3538 _foo = 1000;
3539@end smallexample
3540
3541In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3542transformation has taken place.
3543
3544When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3545things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3546in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3547second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3548table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3549contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3550value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3551
3552@smallexample
3553 int foo = 1000;
3554@end smallexample
3555
3556creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3557holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3558number 1000 is initially stored.
3559
3560When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3561first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3562memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3563So:
3564
3565@smallexample
3566 foo = 1;
3567@end smallexample
3568
3569looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3570associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3571address. Whereas:
3572
3573@smallexample
3574 int * a = & foo;
3575@end smallexample
3576
3577looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3578and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3579the variable @samp{a}.
3580
3581Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3582the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3583an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3584
3585@smallexample
3586 foo = 1000;
3587@end smallexample
3588
3589creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3590the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3591address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3592linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3593access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3594
3595Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3596you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3597use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3598section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3599linker script contains these declarations:
3600
3601@smallexample
3602@group
3603 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3604 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3605 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3606@end group
3607@end smallexample
3608
3609Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3610
3611@smallexample
3612@group
3613 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3614
73ae6183
NC
3615 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3616@end group
3617@end smallexample
3618
3619Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3620
252b5132 3621@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3622@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3623@kindex SECTIONS
3624The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3625into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3626
3627The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3628@smallexample
3629SECTIONS
3630@{
3631 @var{sections-command}
3632 @var{sections-command}
3633 @dots{}
3634@}
3635@end smallexample
3636
3637Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3638
3639@itemize @bullet
3640@item
3641an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3642@item
3643a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3644@item
3645an output section description
3646@item
3647an overlay description
3648@end itemize
3649
3650The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3651@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3652those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3653understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3654the layout of the output file.
3655
3656Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3657below.
3658
3659If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3660linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3661section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3662input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3663example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3664in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3665
3666@menu
3667* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3668* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3669* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3670* Input Section:: Input section description
3671* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3672* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3673* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3674* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3675* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3676@end menu
3677
3678@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3679@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3680The full description of an output section looks like this:
3681@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3682@group
7e7d5768 3683@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3684 [AT(@var{lma})]
3685 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3686 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3687 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3688 @{
3689 @var{output-section-command}
3690 @var{output-section-command}
3691 @dots{}
562d3460 3692 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3693@end group
3694@end smallexample
3695
3696Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3697
3698The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3699name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3700The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3701
3702Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3703
3704@itemize @bullet
3705@item
3706a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3707@item
3708an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3709@item
3710data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3711@item
3712a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3713@end itemize
3714
3715@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3716@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3717@cindex name, section
3718@cindex section name
3719The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3720meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3721support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3722must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3723example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3724output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3725names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3726quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3727characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3728commas must be quoted.
3729
3730The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3731Discarding}.
3732
3733@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3734@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3735@cindex address, section
3736@cindex section address
3737The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3738address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3739is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3740
3741If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3742section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3743to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3744alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3745contained within the output section.
3746
3747The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3748
3749@itemize @bullet
3750@item
3751If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3752is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3753in that region.
3754
3755@item
3756If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3757regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3758section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3759be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3760
3761@item
3762If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3763the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3764counter.
3765@end itemize
3766
3767@noindent
3768For example:
3769
252b5132
RH
3770@smallexample
3771.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3772@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3773
252b5132
RH
3774@noindent
3775and
ea5cae92 3776
252b5132
RH
3777@smallexample
3778.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3779@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3780
252b5132
RH
3781@noindent
3782are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3783@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3784counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3785counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3786input sections.
252b5132
RH
3787
3788The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3789For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3790so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3791do something like this:
3792@smallexample
3793.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3794@end smallexample
3795@noindent
3796This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3797aligned upward to the specified value.
3798
3799Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3800location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3801sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3802
3803@node Input Section
36f63dca 3804@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3805@cindex input sections
3806@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3807The most common output section command is an input section description.
3808
3809The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3810You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3811in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3812map the input files into your memory layout.
3813
3814@menu
3815* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3816* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3817* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3818* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3819* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3820@end menu
3821
3822@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3823@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3824@cindex input section basics
3825An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3826by a list of section names in parentheses.
3827
3828The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3829describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3830
3831The most common input section description is to include all input
3832sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3833include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3834@smallexample
3835*(.text)
3836@end smallexample
3837@noindent
18625d54
CM
3838Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3839of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3840match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3841example:
252b5132 3842@smallexample
b4346c09 3843*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3844@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3845will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3846@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3847
3848There are two ways to include more than one section:
3849@smallexample
3850*(.text .rdata)
3851*(.text) *(.rdata)
3852@end smallexample
3853@noindent
3854The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3855@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3856first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3857they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3858@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3859@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3860
3861You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3862You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3863needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3864@smallexample
3865data.o(.data)
3866@end smallexample
3867
ae17ab41
CM
3868To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3869of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3870
3871Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3872
3873@smallexample
3874@group
3875SECTIONS @{
3876 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3877 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3878@}
3879@end group
3880@end smallexample
3881
3882In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3883input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3884@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3885@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3886whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3887
967928e9
AM
3888You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3889matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3890with no whitespace around the colon.
3891
3892@table @samp
3893@item archive:file
3894matches file within archive
3895@item archive:
3896matches the whole archive
3897@item :file
3898matches file but not one in an archive
3899@end table
3900
3901Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3902wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3903single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3904@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3905within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3906also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3907other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3908from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3909command.
3910
252b5132
RH
3911If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3912the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3913commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3914@smallexample
3915data.o
3916@end smallexample
3917
967928e9
AM
3918When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3919and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3920characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3921name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3922did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3923though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3924@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3925the archive search path.
3926
3927@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3928@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3929@cindex input section wildcards
3930@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3931@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3932@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3933In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3934name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3935
3936The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3937pattern for the file name.
3938
3939The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3940
3941@table @samp
3942@item *
3943matches any number of characters
3944@item ?
3945matches any single character
3946@item [@var{chars}]
3947matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3948character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3949@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3950@item \
3951quotes the following character
3952@end table
3953
3954When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3955will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3956Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3957exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3958@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3959a @samp{/} character.
3960
3961File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3962specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3963does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3964
3965If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3966appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3967will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3968sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3969@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3970@smallexample
3971.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3972.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3973@end smallexample
3974
bcaa7b3e 3975@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3976Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3977in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3978this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3979pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3980@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3981into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3982
bcaa7b3e
L
3983@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3984@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3985difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3986ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3987
02ecc8e9
L
3988@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3989@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3990difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3991ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3992encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3993
bcaa7b3e
L
3994@cindex SORT
3995@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3996
3997When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3998can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3999
4000@enumerate
4001@item
4002@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4003It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4004sections have the same name.
4005@item
4006@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4007It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4008sections have the same alignment.
4009@item
c0065db7 4010@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4011treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4012@item
4013@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4014is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4015@item
4016All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4017@end enumerate
4018
4019When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4020section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4021takes precedence over the command line option.
4022
4023If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4024command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4025treated as nested sorting command.
4026
4027@enumerate
4028@item
4029@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4030@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4031@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4032@item
4033@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4034@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4035@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4036@end enumerate
4037
4038If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4039command line option will be ignored.
4040
eda680f8
L
4041@cindex SORT_NONE
4042@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4043section sorting option.
4044
252b5132
RH
4045If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4046@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4047precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4048
4049This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4050files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4051sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4052The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4053with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4054linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4055@smallexample
4056@group
4057SECTIONS @{
4058 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4059 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4060 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4061 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4062@}
4063@end group
4064@end smallexample
4065
4066@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4067@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4068@cindex common symbol placement
4069@cindex uninitialized data placement
4070A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4071file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4072linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4073named @samp{COMMON}.
4074
4075You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4076other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4077particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4078input files are placed in another section.
4079
4080In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4081@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4082@smallexample
4083.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4084@end smallexample
4085
4086@cindex scommon section
4087@cindex small common symbols
4088Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4089example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4090symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4091different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4092the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4093symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4094to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4095locations.
4096
4097@cindex [COMMON]
4098You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4099notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4100@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4101
4102@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4103@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4104@cindex KEEP
4105@cindex garbage collection
4106When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4107it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4108This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4109with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4110@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4111
4112@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4113@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4114The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4115to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4116start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4117@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4118follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4119@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4120@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4121All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4122files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4123
4124@smallexample
4125@group
4126SECTIONS @{
4127 outputa 0x10000 :
4128 @{
4129 all.o
4130 foo.o (.input1)
4131 @}
36f63dca
NC
4132@end group
4133@group
252b5132
RH
4134 outputb :
4135 @{
4136 foo.o (.input2)
4137 foo1.o (.input1)
4138 @}
36f63dca
NC
4139@end group
4140@group
252b5132
RH
4141 outputc :
4142 @{
4143 *(.input1)
4144 *(.input2)
4145 @}
4146@}
4147@end group
a1ab1d2a 4148@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4149
4150@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4151@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4152@cindex data
4153@cindex section data
4154@cindex output section data
4155@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4156@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4157@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4158@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4159@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4160You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4161@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4162an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4163parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4164value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4165counter.
4166
4167The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4168store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4169bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4170stored.
4171
4172For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4173of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4174@smallexample
4175BYTE(1)
4176LONG(addr)
4177@end smallexample
4178
4179When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4180same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4181target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4182@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4183@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4184
4185If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4186which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4187When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4188true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4189endianness of the first input object file.
4190
36f63dca 4191Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4192between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4193@smallexample
4194SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4195@end smallexample
4196whereas this will work:
4197@smallexample
4198SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4199@end smallexample
4200
252b5132
RH
4201@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4202@cindex holes, filling
4203@cindex unspecified memory
4204You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4205current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4206otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4207gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4208with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4209necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4210point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4211than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4212different parts of an output section.
4213
4214This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4215value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4216@smallexample
563e308f 4217FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4218@end smallexample
4219
4220The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4221section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4222part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4223entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4224precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4225expression.
252b5132
RH
4226
4227@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4228@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4229There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4230commands.
4231
4232@table @code
4233@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4234@cindex input filename symbols
4235@cindex filename symbols
4236@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4237The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4238The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4239file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4240the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4241
4242This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4243normally used for any other object file format.
4244
4245@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4246@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4247@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4248@item CONSTRUCTORS
4249When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4250unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4251destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4252arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4253automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4254For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4255linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4256@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4257ignored for other object file formats.
4258
4259The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4260constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4261Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4262the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4263first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4264of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4265compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4266formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4267@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4268the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4269destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4270@code{exit}.
4271
4272For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4273arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4274addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4275and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4276linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4277runtime code expects to see.
4278
4279@smallexample
4280 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4281 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4282 *(.ctors)
4283 LONG(0)
4284 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4285 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4286 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4287 *(.dtors)
4288 LONG(0)
4289 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4290@end smallexample
4291
4292If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4293which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4294are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4295are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4296command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4297@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4298@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4299@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4300
4301Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4302and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4303need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4304scripts.
4305
4306@end table
4307
4308@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4309@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4310@cindex discarding sections
4311@cindex sections, discarding
4312@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4313The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4314for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4315be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4316@smallexample
49c13adb 4317.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4318@end smallexample
4319@noindent
4320will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4321@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4322sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4323space in an output section will also create the output section.
4324
a0976ea4 4325The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4326on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4327symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4328the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4329section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4330
4331@cindex /DISCARD/
4332The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4333input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4334section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4335
4336@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4337@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4338@cindex output section attributes
4339We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4340like this:
0c71d759 4341
252b5132 4342@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4343@group
7e7d5768 4344@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4345 [AT(@var{lma})]
4346 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4347 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4348 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4349 @{
4350 @var{output-section-command}
4351 @var{output-section-command}
4352 @dots{}
562d3460 4353 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4354@end group
4355@end smallexample
0c71d759 4356
252b5132
RH
4357We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4358@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4359remaining section attributes.
4360
a1ab1d2a 4361@menu
252b5132
RH
4362* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4363* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4364* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4365* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4366* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4367* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4368* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4369* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4370@end menu
4371
4372@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4373@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4374Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4375parentheses. The following types are defined:
4376
4377@table @code
4378@item NOLOAD
4379The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4380loaded into memory when the program is run.
4381@item DSECT
4382@itemx COPY
4383@itemx INFO
4384@itemx OVERLAY
4385These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4386rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4387marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4388section when the program is run.
4389@end table
4390
4391@kindex NOLOAD
4392@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4393@cindex loading, preventing
4394The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4395the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4396the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4397@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4398need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4399@smallexample
4400@group
4401SECTIONS @{
4402 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4403 @dots{}
4404@}
4405@end group
4406@end smallexample
4407
4408@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4409@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4410@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4411@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4412@cindex load address
4413@cindex section load address
4414Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4415@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4416@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4417specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4418address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4419
ea5cae92
NC
4420The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4421specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4422takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4423load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4424region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4425
4426If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4427section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4428load address:
4429
4430@itemize @bullet
4431@item
4432If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4433the LMA address as well.
4434
4435@item
4436If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4437
4438@item
4439Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4440with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4441section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4442VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4443the last section in the located region.
4444
4445@item
4446If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4447that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4448
4449@item
4450If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4451section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4452@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4453
4454@cindex ROM initialized data
4455@cindex initialized data in ROM
4456This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4457example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4458called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4459@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4460even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4461uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4462defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4463counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4464
4465@smallexample
4466@group
4467SECTIONS
4468 @{
4469 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4470 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4471 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4472 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4473 .bss 0x3000 :
4474 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4475@}
4476@end group
4477@end smallexample
4478
4479The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4480this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4481the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4482how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4483script.
4484
4485@smallexample
4486@group
4487extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4488char *src = &_etext;
4489char *dst = &_data;
4490
ea5cae92
NC
4491/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4492while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4493 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4494
ea5cae92 4495/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4496for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4497 *dst = 0;
4498@end group
4499@end smallexample
4500
bbf115d3
L
4501@node Forced Output Alignment
4502@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4503@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4504@cindex forcing output section alignment
4505@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4506You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4507
7e7d5768
AM
4508@node Forced Input Alignment
4509@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4510@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4511@cindex forcing input section alignment
4512@cindex input section alignment
4513You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4514SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4515sections, whether larger or smaller.
4516
0c71d759
NC
4517@node Output Section Constraint
4518@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4519@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4520@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4521@cindex constraints on output sections
4522You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4523of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4524read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4525@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4526
252b5132 4527@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4528@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4529@kindex >@var{region}
4530@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4531@cindex memory regions and sections
4532You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4533using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4534
4535Here is a simple example:
4536@smallexample
4537@group
4538MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4539SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4540@end group
4541@end smallexample
4542
4543@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4544@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4545@kindex :@var{phdr}
4546@cindex section, assigning to program header
4547@cindex program headers and sections
4548You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4549using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4550one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4551assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4552@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4553linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4554
4555Here is a simple example:
4556@smallexample
4557@group
4558PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4559SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4560@end group
4561@end smallexample
4562
4563@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4564@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4565@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4566@cindex section fill pattern
4567@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4568You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4569@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4570(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4571within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4572alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4573necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4574of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4575an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4576fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4577other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4578pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4579expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4580
4581You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4582output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4583
4584Here is a simple example:
4585@smallexample
4586@group
563e308f 4587SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4588@end group
4589@end smallexample
4590
4591@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4592@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4593@kindex OVERLAY
4594@cindex overlays
4595An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4596are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4597the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4598copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4599required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4600can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4601than another.
4602
4603Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4604@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4605output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4606command is as follows:
4607@smallexample
4608@group
4609OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4610 @{
4611 @var{secname1}
4612 @{
4613 @var{output-section-command}
4614 @var{output-section-command}
4615 @dots{}
4616 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4617 @var{secname2}
4618 @{
4619 @var{output-section-command}
4620 @var{output-section-command}
4621 @dots{}
4622 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4623 @dots{}
4624 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4625@end group
4626@end smallexample
4627
4628Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4629section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4630section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4631those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4632except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4633sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4634
4635The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4636addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4637memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4638whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4639and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4640and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4641
4642If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4643among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4644all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4645section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4646NOCROSSREFS}.
4647
4648For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4649provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4650defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4651@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4652the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4653within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4654symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4655
4656At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4657the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4658
4659Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4660@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4661@smallexample
4662@group
4663 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4664 @{
4665 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4666 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4667 @}
4668@end group
4669@end smallexample
4670@noindent
4671This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4672address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4673@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4674following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4675@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4676@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4677
4678C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4679like the following.
4680
4681@smallexample
4682@group
4683 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4684 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4685 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4686@end group
4687@end smallexample
4688
4689Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4690everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4691example could have been written identically as follows.
4692
4693@smallexample
4694@group
4695 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4696 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4697 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4698 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4699 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4700 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4701 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4702@end group
4703@end smallexample
4704
4705@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4706@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4707@kindex MEMORY
4708@cindex memory regions
4709@cindex regions of memory
4710@cindex allocating memory
4711@cindex discontinuous memory
4712The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4713memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4714
4715The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4716memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4717may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4718can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4719set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4720regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4721around to fit into the available regions.
4722
4723A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4724command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4725you wish. The syntax is:
4726@smallexample
4727@group
a1ab1d2a 4728MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4729 @{
4730 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @}
4733@end group
4734@end smallexample
4735
4736The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4737region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4738Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4739with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4740must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4741add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4742command.
252b5132
RH
4743
4744@cindex memory region attributes
4745The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4746whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4747not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4748@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4749section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4750the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4751them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4752
4753The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4754@table @samp
4755@item R
4756Read-only section
4757@item W
4758Read/write section
4759@item X
4760Executable section
4761@item A
4762Allocatable section
4763@item I
4764Initialized section
4765@item L
4766Same as @samp{I}
4767@item !
c09e9a8c 4768Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4769@end table
4770
4771If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4772@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4773attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4774in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4775attributes.
4776
4777@kindex ORIGIN =
4778@kindex o =
4779@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4780The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4781the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4782cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4783abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4784@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4785
4786@kindex LENGTH =
4787@kindex len =
4788@kindex l =
4789The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4790region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4791be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4792@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4793
4794In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4795available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4796and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4797linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4798is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4799or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4800explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4801region.
4802
4803@smallexample
4804@group
a1ab1d2a 4805MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4806 @{
4807 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4808 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4809 @}
4810@end group
4811@end smallexample
4812
4813Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4814specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4815@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4816a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4817output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4818was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4819the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4820output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4821region, the linker will issue an error message.
4822
3ec57632 4823It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4824expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4825@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4826
4827@smallexample
4828@group
c0065db7 4829 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4830@end group
4831@end smallexample
4832
252b5132
RH
4833@node PHDRS
4834@section PHDRS Command
4835@kindex PHDRS
4836@cindex program headers
4837@cindex ELF program headers
4838@cindex program segments
4839@cindex segments, ELF
4840The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4841@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4842loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4843program with the @samp{-p} option.
4844
4845When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4846reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4847program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4848This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4849interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4850
4851The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4852in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4853precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4854the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4855not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4856
4857The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4858generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4859ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4860
4861This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4862@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4863
4864@smallexample
4865@group
4866PHDRS
4867@{
4868 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4869 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4870@}
4871@end group
4872@end smallexample
4873
4874The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4875of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4876header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4877with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4878must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4879is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4880
4881Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4882system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4883specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4884sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4885attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4886Section Phdr}.
4887
4888It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4889merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4890repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4891contain the section.
4892
4893If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4894then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4895not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4896convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4897placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4898default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4899segment at all.
4900
4901@kindex FILEHDR
4902@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4903You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4904the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4905The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4906file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4907include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4908segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4909these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4910
4911The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4912value of the keyword.
4913
4914@table @asis
4915@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4916Indicates an unused program header.
4917
4918@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4919Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4920the file.
4921
4922@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4923Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4924
4925@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4926Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4927found.
4928
4929@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4930Indicates a segment holding note information.
4931
4932@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4933A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4934ABI.
4935
4936@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4937Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4938
4939@item @var{expression}
4940An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4941be used for types not defined above.
4942@end table
4943
4944You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4945in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4946@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4947Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4948output section attribute.
4949
4950The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4951which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4952explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4953an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4954header.
4955
4956Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4957headers used on a native ELF system.
4958
4959@example
4960@group
4961PHDRS
4962@{
4963 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4964 interp PT_INTERP ;
4965 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4966 data PT_LOAD ;
4967 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4968@}
4969
4970SECTIONS
4971@{
4972 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4973 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4974 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4975 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4976 @dots{}
4977 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4978 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4979 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4980 @dots{}
4981@}
4982@end group
4983@end example
4984
4985@node VERSION
4986@section VERSION Command
4987@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4988@cindex symbol versions
4989@cindex version script
4990@cindex versions of symbols
4991The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4992only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4993symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4994a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4995shared library.
4996
4997You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4998you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4999also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5000
5001The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5002@smallexample
5003VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5004@end smallexample
5005
5006The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5007Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5008version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5009version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5010version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5011scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5012library.
5013
5014The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5015examples.
5016
5017@smallexample
5018VERS_1.1 @{
5019 global:
5020 foo1;
5021 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5022 old*;
5023 original*;
5024 new*;
252b5132
RH
5025@};
5026
5027VERS_1.2 @{
5028 foo2;
5029@} VERS_1.1;
5030
5031VERS_2.0 @{
5032 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5033 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5034 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5035 "f(int, double)";
5036 @};
252b5132
RH
5037@} VERS_1.2;
5038@end smallexample
5039
5040This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5041version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5042The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5043a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5044of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5045symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5046is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5047in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5048However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5049name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5050
5051Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5052depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5053to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5054
5055Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5056depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5057and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5058
5059When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5060specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5061unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5062unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5063somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5064wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5065wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5066set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5067ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5068
5069The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5070they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5071could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5072However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5073
0f6bf451 5074Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5075in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5076symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5077won't.
5078
5079@smallexample
7c9c73be 5080@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5081@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5082
252b5132
RH
5083When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5084symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5085requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5086shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5087loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5088linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5089application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5090way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5091all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5092search for each symbol reference.
5093
5094The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5095doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5096that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5097functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5098the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5099required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5100that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5101versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5102the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5103
5104There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5105first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5106source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5107script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5108maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5109@smallexample
5110__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5111@end smallexample
5112@noindent
5113in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5114be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5115The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5116@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5117takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5118
5119The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5120function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5121an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5122version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5123linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5124
5125To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5126source file. Here is an example:
5127
5128@smallexample
5129__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5130__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5131__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5132__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5133@end smallexample
5134
5135In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5136unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5137example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5138@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5139
5140When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5141some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5142this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5143@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5144declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5145you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5146
5147If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5148within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5149(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5150specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5151
cb840a31
L
5152You can also specify the language in the version script:
5153
5154@smallexample
5155VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5156@end smallexample
5157
c0065db7 5158The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5159The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5160demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5161patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5162@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5163
86043bbb
MM
5164Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5165described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5166or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5167the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5168whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5169cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5170might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5171should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5172expect when you upgrade.
5173
252b5132
RH
5174@node Expressions
5175@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5176@cindex expressions
5177@cindex arithmetic
5178The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5179that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5180expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5181host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5182
5183You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5184
5185The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5186expressions.
5187
5188@menu
5189* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5190* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5191* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5192* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5193* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5194* Operators:: Operators
5195* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5196* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5197* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5198@end menu
5199
5200@node Constants
5201@subsection Constants
5202@cindex integer notation
5203@cindex constants in linker scripts
5204All constants are integers.
5205
5206As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5207octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5208hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5209@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5210@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5211value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5212
5213@cindex scaled integers
5214@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5215@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5216@cindex suffixes for integers
5217@cindex integer suffixes
5218In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5219constant by
5220@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5221@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5222@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5223@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5224@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5225@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5226@tex
5227${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5228@end tex
5229@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5230respectively. For example, the following
5231all refer to the same quantity:
5232
252b5132 5233@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5234_fourk_1 = 4K;
5235_fourk_2 = 4096;
5236_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5237_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5238@end smallexample
5239
8a308ae8
NC
5240Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5241conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5242
0c71d759
NC
5243@node Symbolic Constants
5244@subsection Symbolic Constants
5245@cindex symbolic constants
5246@kindex CONSTANT
5247It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5248the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5249
5250@table @code
5251@item MAXPAGESIZE
5252@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5253The target's maximum page size.
5254
5255@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5256@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5257The target's default page size.
5258@end table
5259
5260So for example:
5261
5262@smallexample
5263 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5264@end smallexample
5265
5266will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5267supported by the target.
5268
252b5132
RH
5269@node Symbols
5270@subsection Symbol Names
5271@cindex symbol names
5272@cindex names
5273@cindex quoted symbol names
5274@kindex "
5275Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5276and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5277Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5278specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5279keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5280@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5281"SECTION" = 9;
5282"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5283@end smallexample
5284
5285Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5286to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5287whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5288
ecca9871
L
5289@node Orphan Sections
5290@subsection Orphan Sections
5291@cindex orphan
5292Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5293are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5294script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5295output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5296placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5297attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5298same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5299If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5300at the end of the file.
5301
5302For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5303well as section flag.
5304
41911f68 5305If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5306the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5307__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5308section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5309orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5310representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5311character.
5312
252b5132
RH
5313@node Location Counter
5314@subsection The Location Counter
5315@kindex .
5316@cindex dot
5317@cindex location counter
5318@cindex current output location
5319The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5320current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5321location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5322within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5323anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5324
5325@cindex holes
5326Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5327moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5328location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5329and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5330doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5331
5332@smallexample
5333SECTIONS
5334@{
5335 output :
5336 @{
5337 file1(.text)
5338 . = . + 1000;
5339 file2(.text)
5340 . += 1000;
5341 file3(.text)
563e308f 5342 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5343@}
5344@end smallexample
5345@noindent
5346In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5347located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5348followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5349@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5350@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5351specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5352
5c6bbab8
NC
5353@cindex dot inside sections
5354Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5355current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5356statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5357absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5358however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5359not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5360
5361@smallexample
5362SECTIONS
5363@{
5364 . = 0x100
5365 .text: @{
5366 *(.text)
5367 . = 0x200
5368 @}
5369 . = 0x500
5370 .data: @{
5371 *(.data)
5372 . += 0x600
5373 @}
5374@}
5375@end smallexample
5376
5377The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5378and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5379the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5380much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5381move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5382and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5383the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5384the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5385
b5666f2f
AM
5386@cindex dot outside sections
5387Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5388output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5389needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5390
5391@smallexample
5392SECTIONS
5393@{
5394 start_of_text = . ;
5395 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5396 end_of_text = . ;
5397
5398 start_of_data = . ;
5399 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5400 end_of_data = . ;
5401@}
5402@end smallexample
5403
5404If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5405not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5406between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5407should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5408blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5409the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5410sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5411statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5412special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5413place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5414as follows:
5415
5416@smallexample
5417SECTIONS
5418@{
5419 start_of_text = . ;
5420 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5421 end_of_text = . ;
5422
5423 start_of_data = . ;
5424 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5425 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5426 end_of_data = . ;
5427@}
5428@end smallexample
5429
5430This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5431@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5432placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5433assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5434a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5435section. So you could write:
5436
5437@smallexample
5438SECTIONS
5439@{
5440 start_of_text = . ;
5441 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5442 end_of_text = . ;
5443
5444 . = . ;
5445 start_of_data = . ;
5446 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5447 end_of_data = . ;
5448@}
5449@end smallexample
5450
5451Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5452@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5453
252b5132
RH
5454@need 2000
5455@node Operators
5456@subsection Operators
5457@cindex operators for arithmetic
5458@cindex arithmetic operators
5459@cindex precedence in expressions
5460The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5461the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5462@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5463@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5464@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5465@smallexample
5466precedence associativity Operators Notes
5467(highest)
54681 left ! - ~ (1)
54692 left * / %
54703 left + -
54714 left >> <<
54725 left == != > < <= >=
54736 left &
54747 left |
54758 left &&
54769 left ||
547710 right ? :
547811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5479(lowest)
5480@end smallexample
5481Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5482(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5483(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5484@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5485@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5486@tex
5487\vskip \baselineskip
5488%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5489\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5490\hrule
5491\halign
5492{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5493height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5494&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5495height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5496\noalign{\hrule}
5497height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5498&highest&&&&&\cr
5499% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5500&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5501&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5502&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5503&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5504&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5505&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5506&7&&left&&|&\cr
5507&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5508&9&&left&&||&\cr
5509&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5510&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5511&lowest&&&&&\cr
5512height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5513\hrule}
5514@end tex
5515@iftex
5516{
5517@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5518@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5519@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5520}
5521@end iftex
5522@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5523
5524@node Evaluation
5525@subsection Evaluation
5526@cindex lazy evaluation
5527@cindex expression evaluation order
5528The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5529an expression when absolutely necessary.
5530
5531The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5532address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5533regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5534as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5535
5536However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5537until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5538other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5539for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5540
5541The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5542assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5543allocation.
5544
5545Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5546@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5547
5548If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5549available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5550following
5551@smallexample
5552@group
5553SECTIONS
5554 @{
a1ab1d2a 5555 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5556 @{ *(.text) @}
5557 @}
5558@end group
5559@end smallexample
5560@noindent
5561will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5562address}.
5563
5564@node Expression Section
5565@subsection The Section of an Expression
5566@cindex expression sections
5567@cindex absolute expressions
5568@cindex relative expressions
5569@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5570@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5571@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5572Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5573relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5574using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5575value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5576symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5577operations.
5578
abf4be64
AM
5579Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5580section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5581address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5582@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5583functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5584One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5585(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5586differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5587versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5588section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5589Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5590absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5591given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5592everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5593
5594In the following simple example,
252b5132 5595
7542af2a
AM
5596@smallexample
5597@group
5598SECTIONS
5599 @{
5600 . = 0x100;
5601 __executable_start = 0x100;
5602 .data :
5603 @{
5604 . = 0x10;
5605 __data_start = 0x10;
5606 *(.data)
5607 @}
5608 @dots{}
5609 @}
5610@end group
5611@end smallexample
252b5132 5612
7542af2a
AM
5613both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5614address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5615@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5616section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5617
5c3049d2
AM
5618For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5619addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5620
5621@itemize @bullet
5622@item
5623Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5624relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5625and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5626@item
5627Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5628or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5629same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5630address before applying the operator.
5631@end itemize
5632
5633The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5634
5635@itemize @bullet
5636@item
5637An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5638@item
5639The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5640@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5641The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5642relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5643(after above conversions) is also a number.
5644@item
5645The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5646relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5647section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5648@item
5649The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5650conversions) is an absolute address.
5651@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5652
5653You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5654to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5655create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5656section @samp{.data}:
5657@smallexample
5658SECTIONS
5659 @{
5660 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5661 @}
5662@end smallexample
5663@noindent
5664If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5665@samp{.data} section.
5666
7542af2a
AM
5667Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5668particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5669
252b5132
RH
5670@node Builtin Functions
5671@subsection Builtin Functions
5672@cindex functions in expressions
5673The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5674use in linker script expressions.
5675
5676@table @code
5677@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5678@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5679@cindex expression, absolute
5680Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5681of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5682value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5683normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5684
5685@item ADDR(@var{section})
5686@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5687@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5688Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5689script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5690the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5691@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5692@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5693the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5694@smallexample
5695@group
5696SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5697 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5698 @{
252b5132
RH
5699 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5700 @dots{}
5701 @}
5702 .output :
5703 @{
5704 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5705 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5706 @}
5707@dots{} @}
5708@end group
5709@end smallexample
5710
876f4090
NS
5711@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5712@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5713@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5714@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5715@cindex round up location counter
5716@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5717@cindex round up expression
5718@cindex align expression
5719Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5720to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5721doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5722arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5723expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5724equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5725
5726Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5727next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5728variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5729input sections:
252b5132
RH
5730@smallexample
5731@group
5732SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5733 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5734 *(.data)
5735 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5736 @}
5737@dots{} @}
5738@end group
5739@end smallexample
5740@noindent
5741The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5742a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5743a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5744of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5745
5746The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5747
362c1d1a
NS
5748@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5749@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5750@cindex section alignment
5751Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5752been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5753evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5754the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5755value in that section.
5756@smallexample
5757@group
5758SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5759 .output @{
5760 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5761 @dots{}
5762 @}
5763@dots{} @}
5764@end group
5765@end smallexample
5766
252b5132
RH
5767@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5768@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5769This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5770scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5771section.
5772
2d20f7bf
JJ
5773@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5774@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5775This is equivalent to either
5776@smallexample
5777(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5778@end smallexample
5779or
5780@smallexample
5781(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5782@end smallexample
5783@noindent
5784depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5785for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5786@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5787If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5788memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5789bytes in the on-disk file.
5790
5791This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5792any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5793@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5794be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5795working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5796
5797@noindent
5798Example:
5799@smallexample
5800 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5801@end smallexample
5802
5803@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5804@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5805This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5806evaluation purposes.
5807
5808@smallexample
5809 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5810@end smallexample
5811
a4f5ad88
JJ
5812@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5813@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5814This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5815@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5816When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5817does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5818@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5819boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5820it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5821@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5822
5823@smallexample
5824 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5825@end smallexample
5826
252b5132
RH
5827@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5828@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5829@cindex symbol defaults
5830Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5831defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5832return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5833default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5834shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5835the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5836existed, its value is preserved:
5837
5838@smallexample
5839@group
5840SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5841 .text : @{
5842 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5843 @dots{}
5844 @}
5845 @dots{}
5846@}
5847@end group
5848@end smallexample
5849
3ec57632
NC
5850@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5851@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5852Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5853
252b5132
RH
5854@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5855@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5856@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5857Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5858Section LMA}).
5859
5860@kindex MAX
5861@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5862Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5863
5864@kindex MIN
5865@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5866Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5867
5868@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5869@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5870@cindex unallocated address, next
5871Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5872This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5873use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5874output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5875
3ec57632
NC
5876@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5877@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5878Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5879
ba916c8a
MM
5880@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5881@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5882Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5883value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5884option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5885@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5886be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5887``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5888name.
5889
252b5132
RH
5890@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5891@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5892@cindex section size
5893Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5894been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5895evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5896@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5897@smallexample
5898@group
5899SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5900 .output @{
5901 .start = . ;
5902 @dots{}
5903 .end = . ;
5904 @}
5905 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5906 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5907@dots{} @}
5908@end group
5909@end smallexample
5910
5911@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5912@itemx sizeof_headers
5913@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5914@cindex header size
5915Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5916information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5917this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5918choose, to facilitate paging.
5919
5920@cindex not enough room for program headers
5921@cindex program headers, not enough room
5922When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5923@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5924number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5925addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5926additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5927room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5928the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5929script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5930you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5931command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5932@end table
5933
5934@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5935@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5936@cindex implicit linker scripts
5937If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5938an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5939linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5940linker will report an error.
5941
5942An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5943
5944Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5945assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5946commands.
5947
5948Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5949at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5950read. This can affect archive searching.
5951
5952@ifset GENERIC
5953@node Machine Dependent
5954@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5955
5956@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5957@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5958sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5959functionality are not listed.
5960
5961@menu
36f63dca
NC
5962@ifset H8300
5963* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5964@end ifset
5965@ifset I960
5966* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5967@end ifset
5968@ifset ARM
5969* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5970@end ifset
5971@ifset HPPA
5972* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5973@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5974@ifset M68K
5975* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5976@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5977@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5978* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5979@end ifset
2469cfa2 5980@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5981* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5982@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5983@ifset M68HC11
5984* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5985@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5986@ifset POWERPC
5987* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5988@end ifset
5989@ifset POWERPC64
5990* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5991@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5992@ifset SPU
5993* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5994@end ifset
74459f0e 5995@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5996* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5997@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5998@ifset WIN32
5999* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6000@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6001@ifset XTENSA
6002* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6003@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6004@end menu
6005@end ifset
6006
252b5132
RH
6007@ifset H8300
6008@ifclear GENERIC
6009@raisesections
6010@end ifclear
6011
6012@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6013@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6014
6015@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6016For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6017you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6018
6019@table @emph
6020@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6021@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6022@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6023targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6024program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6025respectively.
6026
6027@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6028@item synthesizing instructions
6029@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6030@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6031sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6032page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6033(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6034@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6035top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6036
6037@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6038@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6039biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6040which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6041page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6042(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6043@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6044the top page of memory).
6045
6046@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6047@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
604832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6049changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6050(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6051@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6052the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6053@end table
6054
6055@ifclear GENERIC
6056@lowersections
6057@end ifclear
6058@end ifset
6059
36f63dca 6060@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6061@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6062@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6063@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6064@node Renesas
6065@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6066
c2dcd04e
NC
6067@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6068H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6069options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6070@end ifset
6071@end ifclear
6072
6073@ifset I960
6074@ifclear GENERIC
6075@raisesections
6076@end ifclear
6077
6078@node i960
6079@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6080
6081@cindex i960 support
6082
6083You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6084specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6085family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6086incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6087linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6088libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6089search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6090
6091For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6092well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6093paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6094the names
6095
6096@smallexample
6097@group
6098try
6099libtry.a
6100tryca
6101libtryca.a
6102@end group
6103@end smallexample
6104
6105@noindent
6106The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6107two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6108
6109You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6110the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6111use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6112specifies a library.
6113
6114@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6115@cindex relaxing on i960
6116@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6117you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6118@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6119them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6120instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6121instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6122target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6123not itself call any subroutines).
6124
48229727
JB
6125@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6126@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6127@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6128The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6129
6130The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6131
85fdf906
AH
6132@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6133@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6134The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6135
36f63dca
NC
6136@ifclear GENERIC
6137@lowersections
6138@end ifclear
6139@end ifset
6140
6141@ifset ARM
6142@ifclear GENERIC
6143@raisesections
6144@end ifclear
6145
93fd0973
SC
6146@ifset M68HC11
6147@ifclear GENERIC
6148@raisesections
6149@end ifclear
6150
6151@node M68HC11/68HC12
6152@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6153
6154@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6155
6156@subsection Linker Relaxation
6157
6158For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6159optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6160
6161@table @emph
6162@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6163@item relaxing address modes
6164@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6165targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6166program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6167respectively.
6168
6169@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6170transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6171page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6172
6173@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6174When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6175of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6176addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6177@code{bset} instructions.
6178
6179@end table
6180
6181@subsection Trampoline Generation
6182
6183@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6184@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6185For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6186call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6187will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6188trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6189case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6190point to the function trampoline.
6191
6192@ifclear GENERIC
6193@lowersections
6194@end ifclear
6195@end ifset
6196
36f63dca 6197@node ARM
3674e28a 6198@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6199
6200@cindex ARM interworking support
6201@kindex --support-old-code
6202For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6203between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6204been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6205line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6206libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6207option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6208given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6209which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6210the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6211non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6212
6213@cindex thumb entry point
6214@cindex entry point, thumb
6215@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6216The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6217@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6218But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6219branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6220executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6221
ce11ba6c
KT
6222@cindex PE import table prefixing
6223@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6224The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6225the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6226elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6227import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6228
e489d0ae
PB
6229@cindex BE8
6230@kindex --be8
6231The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6232executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6233The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6234
3674e28a
PB
6235@cindex TARGET1
6236@kindex --target1-rel
6237@kindex --target1-abs
6238The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6239@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6240or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6241and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6242
6243@cindex TARGET2
6244@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6245The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6246@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6247meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6248@table @samp
6249@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6250@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6251@item abs
6252@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6253@item got-rel
6254@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6255@end table
6256
319850b4
JB
6257@cindex FIX_V4BX
6258@kindex --fix-v4bx
6259The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6260specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6261interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6262also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6263
6264In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6265linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6266@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6267
6268In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6269relocations are ignored.
6270
845b51d6
PB
6271@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6272@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6273Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6274relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6275
6276@smallexample
6277TST rM, #1
6278MOVEQ PC, rM
6279BX Rn
6280@end smallexample
6281
6282This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6283and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6284condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6285
33bfe774
JB
6286@cindex USE_BLX
6287@kindex --use-blx
6288The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6289BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6290situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6291code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6292each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6293
6294This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6295specify it if you are using that target.
6296
c6dd86c6
JB
6297@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6298@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6299The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6300bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6301instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6302to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6303the support code can read the intended values.
6304
6305The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6306intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6307and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6308intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6309full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6310you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6311
6312If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6313enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6314@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6315mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6316vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6317@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6318
6319If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6320potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6321such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6322first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6323instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6324the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6325are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6326
2de70689
MGD
6327@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6328@kindex --fix-arm1176
6329@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6330The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6331in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6332are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6333unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6334
6335Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6336Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentaion website at:
6337http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6338
bf21ed78
MS
6339@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6340@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6341The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6342warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6343enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6344linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6345using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6346not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6347
6348@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6349@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6350The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6351warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6352@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6353linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6354using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6355
726150b7
NC
6356@cindex PIC_VENEER
6357@kindex --pic-veneer
6358The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6359ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6360is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6361@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6362
6363@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6364@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6365The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6366code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6367perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6368placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6369controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6370The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6371duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6372group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6373code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6374where they should be placed.
6375
6376The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6377@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6378placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6379branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6380placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6381value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6382exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6383A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6384linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6385from the input sections.
6386
6387The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6388@samp{N = +1}.
6389
1a51c1a4
NC
6390Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6391only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6392otherwise.
6393
36f63dca
NC
6394@ifclear GENERIC
6395@lowersections
6396@end ifclear
6397@end ifset
6398
6399@ifset HPPA
6400@ifclear GENERIC
6401@raisesections
6402@end ifclear
6403
6404@node HPPA ELF32
6405@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6406@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6407@kindex --multi-subspace
6408When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6409import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6410The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6411stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6412multiple sub-spaces.
6413
6414@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6415@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6416Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6417stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6418@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6419sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6420a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6421the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6422conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6423prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6424A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6425branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6426@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6427@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6428detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6429positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6430
6431Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6432single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6433create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6434large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6435
6436@ifclear GENERIC
6437@lowersections
6438@end ifclear
6439@end ifset
6440
7fb9f789
NC
6441@ifset M68K
6442@ifclear GENERIC
6443@raisesections
6444@end ifclear
6445
6446@node M68K
6447@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6448
6449@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6450@kindex --got=@var{type}
6451The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6452The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6453@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6454the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6455@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6456entries only at non-negative offsets.
6457@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6458entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6459support such GOTs.
6460@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6461output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6462file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6463files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6464
6465@ifclear GENERIC
6466@lowersections
6467@end ifclear
6468@end ifset
6469
36f63dca
NC
6470@ifset MMIX
6471@ifclear GENERIC
6472@raisesections
6473@end ifclear
6474
6475@node MMIX
6476@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6477For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6478@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6479understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6480can translate between the two formats.
6481
6482There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6483Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6484registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6485equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6486@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6487global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6488this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6489symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6490
7a2de473
HPN
6491Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6492@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6493The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6494of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6495
6496Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6497are left out from an mmo file.
6498
6499@ifclear GENERIC
6500@lowersections
6501@end ifclear
6502@end ifset
6503
6504@ifset MSP430
6505@ifclear GENERIC
6506@raisesections
6507@end ifclear
6508
6509@node MSP430
6510@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6511For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6512will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6513just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6514
6515@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6516The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6517
6518@table @code
6519@item @samp{.vectors}
6520Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6521
6522@item @samp{.bootloader}
6523Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6524in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6525
6526@item @samp{.infomem}
6527Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6528this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6529
c0065db7 6530@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6531This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6532in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6533
6534@item @samp{.noinit}
6535Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6536
c0065db7 6537The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6538@end table
6539
6540@ifclear GENERIC
6541@lowersections
6542@end ifclear
6543@end ifset
6544
2a60a7a8
AM
6545@ifset POWERPC
6546@ifclear GENERIC
6547@raisesections
6548@end ifclear
6549
6550@node PowerPC ELF32
6551@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6552@cindex PowerPC long branches
6553@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6554Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6555displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6556@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6557@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6558the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6559section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6560section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6561@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6562both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6563considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6564
6565@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6566@table @option
6567@cindex PowerPC PLT
6568@kindex --bss-plt
6569@item --bss-plt
6570Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6571generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6572the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6573writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6574@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6575PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6576compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6577BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6578
016687f8
AM
6579@kindex --secure-plt
6580@item --secure-plt
6581@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6582@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6583when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6584layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6585style BSS PLT.
6586
2a60a7a8
AM
6587@cindex PowerPC GOT
6588@kindex --sdata-got
6589@item --sdata-got
6590The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6591sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6592@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6593section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6594@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6595@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6596@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6597@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6598PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6599pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6600GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6601really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6602
6603@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6604@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6605@item --emit-stub-syms
6606This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6607symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6608
6609@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6610@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6611@item --no-tls-optimize
6612PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6613sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6614disable the optimization.
6615@end table
6616
6617@ifclear GENERIC
6618@lowersections
6619@end ifclear
6620@end ifset
6621
6622@ifset POWERPC64
6623@ifclear GENERIC
6624@raisesections
6625@end ifclear
6626
6627@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6628@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6629
6630@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6631@table @option
6632@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6633@kindex --stub-group-size
6634@item --stub-group-size
6635Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6636by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6637@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6638sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6639a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6640the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6641conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6642prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6643A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6644branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6645@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6646@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6647detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6648positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6649
6650Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6651single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6652create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6653large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6654
6655@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6656@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6657@item --emit-stub-syms
6658This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6659symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6660
6661@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6662@kindex --dotsyms
6663@kindex --no-dotsyms
6664@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6665These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6666in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6667function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6668code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6669properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6670to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6671@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6672dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6673feature.
6674
6675@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6676@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6677@item --no-tls-optimize
6678PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6679sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6680disable the optimization.
6681
6682@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6683@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6684@item --no-opd-optimize
6685PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6686corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6687the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6688Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6689
6690@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6691@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6692@item --non-overlapping-opd
6693Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6694@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6695the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6696entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6697
6698@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6699@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6700@item --no-toc-optimize
6701PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6702entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6703reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6704marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6705marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6706relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6707unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6708reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6709discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6710reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6711code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6712optimization.
6713
6714@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6715@kindex --no-multi-toc
6716@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6717If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6718@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6719where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6720entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6721total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6722grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6723TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6724calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6725help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
672664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6727Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6728
6729@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6730@kindex --no-toc-sort
6731@item --no-toc-sort
6732By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6733happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6734placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6735with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6736referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6737@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6738results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6739off this feature.
6740
6741@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6742@kindex --plt-align
6743@kindex --no-plt-align
6744@item --plt-align
6745@itemx --no-plt-align
6746Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6747aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6748boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6749are packed tightly.
6750
6751@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6752@kindex --plt-static-chain
6753@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6754@item --plt-static-chain
6755@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6756Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6757chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6758chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6759
6760@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6761@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6762@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6763@item --plt-thread-safe
6764@itemx --no-thread-safe
6765With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6766lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6767another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6768order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6769memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6770barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6771looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6772seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6773default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6774@end table
6775
6776@ifclear GENERIC
6777@lowersections
6778@end ifclear
6779@end ifset
6780
49fa1e15
AM
6781@ifset SPU
6782@ifclear GENERIC
6783@raisesections
6784@end ifclear
6785
6786@node SPU ELF
6787@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6788
6789@cindex SPU ELF options
6790@table @option
6791
6792@cindex SPU plugins
6793@kindex --plugin
6794@item --plugin
6795This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6796
6797@cindex SPU overlays
6798@kindex --no-overlays
6799@item --no-overlays
6800Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6801regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6802@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6803turns off all this special overlay handling.
6804
6805@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6806@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6807@item --emit-stub-syms
6808This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6809symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6810
6811@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6812@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6813@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6814This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6815function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6816on calls to non-overlay regions.
6817
6818@cindex SPU local store size
6819@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6820@item --local-store=lo:hi
6821@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6822the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6823range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6824
c0065db7 6825@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6826@kindex --stack-analysis
6827@item --stack-analysis
6828SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6829unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6830under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6831@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6832@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6833determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6834for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6835for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6836for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6837find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6838and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6839under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6840dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6841is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6842and calls will be given.
6843
c0065db7 6844@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6845@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6846@item --emit-stack-syms
6847This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6848in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6849These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6850functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6851functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6852such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6853The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6854@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6855@end table
6856
6857@ifclear GENERIC
6858@lowersections
6859@end ifclear
6860@end ifset
6861
36f63dca
NC
6862@ifset TICOFF
6863@ifclear GENERIC
6864@raisesections
6865@end ifclear
6866
6867@node TI COFF
6868@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6869@cindex TI COFF versions
6870@kindex --format=@var{version}
6871The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6872TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6873also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6874format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6875header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6876
6877@ifclear GENERIC
6878@lowersections
6879@end ifclear
6880@end ifset
6881
2ca22b03
NC
6882@ifset WIN32
6883@ifclear GENERIC
6884@raisesections
6885@end ifclear
6886
6887@node WIN32
6888@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6889
c0065db7 6890This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6891See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6892command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6893
6894@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6895@cindex import libraries
6896@item import libraries
69da35b5 6897The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6898libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6899regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6900archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6901support for creating such libraries provided with the
6902@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6903
c0065db7
RM
6904@item exporting DLL symbols
6905@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6906The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6907
6908@table @emph
6909@item using auto-export functionality
6910@cindex using auto-export functionality
6911By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6912which is controlled by the following command line options:
6913
0a5d968e
NC
6914@itemize
6915@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6916@item --exclude-symbols
6917@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6918@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6919@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6920@end itemize
6921
09e2aba4
DK
6922When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6923(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6924symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6925often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6926private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6927options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6928exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6929final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6930
6931If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6932command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6933if either of the following are true:
6934
6935@itemize
6936@item A DEF file is used.
6937@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6938@end itemize
dc8465bf 6939
c0065db7
RM
6940@item using a DEF file
6941@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6942Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6943an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6944exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6945name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6946command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6947
6948@example
6949gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6950@end example
6951
0a5d968e
NC
6952Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6953@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6954
dc8465bf
NC
6955Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6956
6957@example
4b5bd4e7 6958LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6959
6960EXPORTS
6961foo
6962bar
6963_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6964another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6965var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6966doo = foo == foo2
6967eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6968@end example
dc8465bf 6969
7fcab871 6970This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6971symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6972alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6973by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6974@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6975@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6976export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6977in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6978symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6979
6b31ad16
DS
6980The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6981name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6982the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6983
b45619c0
NC
6984When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6985library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6986@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6987executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6988
6989With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6990specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6991non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6992
6993If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6994or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6995filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6996
4b5bd4e7
DS
6997The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6998
6999@example
7000EXPORTS
7001 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7002 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7003 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7004@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7005
7006Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7007@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7008@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7009@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7010Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7011@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7012string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7013
7014The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7015
7016@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7017will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7018by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7019linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7020library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7021
7022@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7023The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7024the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7025@code{*_imp__foo}).
7026
7027@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7028well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7029read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7030variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7031the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7032extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7033application will behave unexpectedly.
7034
7035@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7036it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7037symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7038API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7039the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7040
4b5bd4e7
DS
7041See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7042other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7043
7044@cindex creating a DEF file
7045While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7046with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7047
7048@item Using decorations
7049@cindex Using decorations
7050Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7051itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7052declared as:
7053
7054@example
7055__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7056__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7057@end example
7058
7059All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7060any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7061this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7062the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7063
7064Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7065decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7066instead:
7067
7068@example
7069__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7070__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7071@end example
7072
c0065db7
RM
7073This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7074when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7075variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7076code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7077of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7078omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7079@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7080information.
c0065db7 7081@end table
dc8465bf 7082
2ca22b03
NC
7083@cindex automatic data imports
7084@item automatic data imports
7085The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7086by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7087compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7088issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7089code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7090c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7091initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7092decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7093platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7094command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7095The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7096suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7097trigger the feature's use.
7098
c0065db7 7099auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7100additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7101
c0065db7 7102"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7103documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7104
c0065db7
RM
7105The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7106occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7107One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7108below.
7109
7110@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7111For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7112object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7113offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7114field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7115in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7116without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7117The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7118references.
7119
c0065db7
RM
7120The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7121be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7122themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7123runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7124compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7125support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7126run without error on an older system.
7127
c0065db7
RM
7128@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7129enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7130
7131@cindex direct linking to a dll
7132@item direct linking to a dll
7133The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7134including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7135libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7136traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7137libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7138function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7139though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7140storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7141tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7142large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7143
c0065db7 7144Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7145@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7146of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7147perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7148select the dll instead of an import library.
7149
2ca22b03 7150
69da35b5
NC
7151For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7152to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7153
7154@example
45e948fe
NC
7155libxxx.dll.a
7156xxx.dll.a
7157libxxx.a
7158xxx.lib
69da35b5 7159cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7160libxxx.dll
7161xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7162@end example
7163
69da35b5
NC
7164before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7165
c0065db7
RM
7166(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7167where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7168@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7169file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7170@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7171
c0065db7
RM
7172Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7173@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7174was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7175various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7176could coexist on the same machine.
7177
2ca22b03
NC
7178The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7179applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7180libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7181
7182@example
7183bin/
7184 cygxxx.dll
7185lib/
7186 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7187 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7188@end example
7189
c0065db7
RM
7190Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7191done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7192
71931. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7194@example
7195gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7196@end example
2ca22b03 7197
69da35b5
NC
7198However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7199(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7200@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7201not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7202
2ca22b03
NC
72032. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7204directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7205should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7206making the app/dll.
7207
7208@example
7209ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7210@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7211
7212Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7213
7214@example
7215gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7216@end example
69da35b5
NC
7217
7218This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7219perfectly legal
7220
7221@example
7222bin/
7223 cygxxx-5.dll
7224lib/
c0065db7 7225 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7226@end example
7227
dc8465bf 7228Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7229even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7230@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7231
7232Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7233wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7234
72351. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7236work with auto-imported data.
7237
dc8465bf
NC
72382. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7239import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7240symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7241for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7242possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7243
45e948fe
NC
72443. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7245critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7246in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7247stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7248
69da35b5 7249So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7250true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7251a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7252binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7253massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7254requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7255will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7256
c0065db7 7257@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7258@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7259@item adding additional names
7260Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7261A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7262exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7263when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7264import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7265
c0065db7 7266@example
dc8465bf
NC
7267LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7268
7269EXPORTS
c0065db7 7270foo
dc8465bf 7271_foo = foo
c0065db7 7272@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7273
7274The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7275
7276Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7277source code using the "weak" attribute:
7278
c0065db7
RM
7279@example
7280void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7281void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7282@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7283
7284See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7285symbols.
7286
7287@item renaming symbols
7288Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7289kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7290@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7291DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7292created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7293
c0065db7 7294@example
dc8465bf
NC
7295LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7296
7297EXPORTS
7298_foo = foo
c0065db7 7299@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7300
7301The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7302@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7303@end table
dc8465bf 7304
0a5d968e 7305Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7306unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7307If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7308@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7309that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7310@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7311renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7312to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7313the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7314In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7315which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7316
7317@cindex weak externals
7318@item weak externals
7319The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7320weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7321defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7322are three variants of weak externals:
7323@itemize
7324@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7325called lazy externals.
7326@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7327This form is not presently implemented.
7328@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7329implemented.
7330@end itemize
7331As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7332are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7333uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7334
7335@cindex aligned common symbols
7336@item aligned common symbols
7337As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7338desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7339the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7340carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7341by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7342tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7343but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7344warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7345@end table
7346
7347@ifclear GENERIC
7348@lowersections
7349@end ifclear
7350@end ifset
7351
e0001a05
NC
7352@ifset XTENSA
7353@ifclear GENERIC
7354@raisesections
7355@end ifclear
7356
7357@node Xtensa
7358@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7359
7360@cindex Xtensa processors
7361The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7362@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7363specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7364keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7365example, with the command:
7366
7367@smallexample
7368SECTIONS
7369@{
7370 .text : @{
7371 *(.literal .text)
7372 @}
7373@}
7374@end smallexample
7375
7376@noindent
7377@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7378and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7379literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7380interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7381group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7382files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7383and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7384
43cd72b9 7385@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7386@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7387Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7388provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7389is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7390literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7391will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7392location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7393the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7394unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7395@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7396range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7397
7398For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7399to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7400instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7401instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7402instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7403@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7404hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7405By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7406switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7407density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7408instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7409performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7410linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7411a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7412
7413The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7414control the linker:
7415
7416@cindex Xtensa options
7417@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7418@item --size-opt
7419When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7420more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7421no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7422alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7423preserve the correctness of the code.
7424@end table
e0001a05
NC
7425
7426@ifclear GENERIC
7427@lowersections
7428@end ifclear
7429@end ifset
7430
252b5132
RH
7431@ifclear SingleFormat
7432@node BFD
7433@chapter BFD
7434
7435@cindex back end
7436@cindex object file management
7437@cindex object formats available
7438@kindex objdump -i
7439The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7440These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7441object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7442format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7443it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7444associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7445object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7446(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7447list all the formats available for your configuration.
7448
7449@cindex BFD requirements
7450@cindex requirements for BFD
7451As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7452several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7453BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7454formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7455been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7456BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7457may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7458
7459One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7460mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7461useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7462conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7463
7464@menu
7465* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7466@end menu
7467
7468@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7469@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7470@cindex opening object files
7471@include bfdsumm.texi
7472@end ifclear
7473
7474@node Reporting Bugs
7475@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7476@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7477@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7478
ff5dcc92 7479Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7480
7481Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7482it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7483to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7484work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7485@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7486
7487In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7488information that enables us to fix the bug.
7489
7490@menu
7491* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7492* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7493@end menu
7494
7495@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7496@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7497@cindex bug criteria
7498
7499If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7500
7501@itemize @bullet
7502@cindex fatal signal
7503@cindex linker crash
7504@cindex crash of linker
7505@item
7506If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7507@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7508
7509@cindex error on valid input
7510@item
ff5dcc92 7511If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7512
7513@cindex invalid input
7514@item
ff5dcc92 7515If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7516may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7517object files are correct.
7518
7519@item
7520If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7521improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7522@end itemize
7523
7524@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7525@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7526@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7527@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7528
7529A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7530products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7531recommend you contact that organization first.
7532
7533You can find contact information for many support companies and
7534individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7535distribution.
7536
ad22bfe8 7537@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7538Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7539@value{BUGURL}.
7540@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7541
7542The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7543@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7544fact or leave it out, state it!
7545
7546Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7547problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7548assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7549matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7550the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7551location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7552were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7553into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7554specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7555and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7556
7557Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7558the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7559on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7560
7561Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7562bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7563respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7564You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7565
7566To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7567
7568@itemize @bullet
7569@item
ff5dcc92 7570The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7571the @samp{--version} argument.
7572
7573Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7574the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7575
7576@item
ff5dcc92 7577Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7578patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7579
7580@item
7581The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7582version number.
7583
7584@item
ff5dcc92 7585What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7586``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7587
7588@item
7589The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7590observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7591list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7592sufficient.
7593
7594If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7595and then we might not encounter the bug.
7596
7597@item
7598A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7599bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7600provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7601bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7602state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7603requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7604we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7605attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7606
7607If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7608@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7609object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7610@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7611how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7612
7613@item
7614A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7615incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7616
ff5dcc92 7617Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7618will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7619not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7620a chance to make a mistake.
7621
7622Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7623say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7624copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7625C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7626and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7627fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7628you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7629any conclusion from our observations.
7630
7631@item
ff5dcc92 7632If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7633diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7634@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7635If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7636context, not by line number.
7637
7638The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7639sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7640@end itemize
7641
7642Here are some things that are not necessary:
7643
7644@itemize @bullet
7645@item
7646A description of the envelope of the bug.
7647
7648Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7649which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7650changes will not affect it.
7651
7652This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7653will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7654with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7655We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7656
7657Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7658of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7659output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7660less time, and so on.
7661
7662However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7663report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7664
7665@item
7666A patch for the bug.
7667
7668A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7669the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7670a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7671to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7672
ff5dcc92 7673Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7674construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7675through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7676able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7677fixed.
7678
7679And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7680patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7681help us to understand.
7682
7683@item
7684A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7685
7686Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7687things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7688@end itemize
7689
7690@node MRI
7691@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7692@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7693To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7694linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7695alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7696described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7697simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7698@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7699linker commands; these commands are described here.
7700
7701In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7702file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7703features to make use of them.
7704
7705You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7706@samp{-c} command-line option.
7707
7708Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7709command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7710blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7711MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7712issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7713
7714Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7715
7716You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7717lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7718The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7719
7720@table @code
7721@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7722@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7723@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7724Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7725the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7726@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7727your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7728script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7729commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7730input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7731@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7732
7733@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7734@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7735Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7736in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7737
7738@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7739
7740@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7741@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7742Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7743@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7744
7745@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7746@item BASE @var{expression}
7747Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7748absolute addresses) in the output file.
7749
7750@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7751@item CHIP @var{expression}
7752@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7753This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7754
7755@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7756@item END
7757This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7758
7759@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7760@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7761Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7762language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7763
7764@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7765@item
252b5132
RH
7766S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7767
7768@item
7769IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7770
7771@item
7772COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7773@samp{COFF}
7774@end enumerate
7775
7776@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7777@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7778Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7779@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7780
7781The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7782same line, with no change in its effect.
7783
7784@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7785@item LOAD @var{filename}
7786@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7787Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7788same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7789command line.
7790
7791@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7792@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7793@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7794MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7795option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7796
7797@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7798@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7799@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7800Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7801order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7802script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7803sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7804file, in the order specified.
7805
7806@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7807@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7808@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7809@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7810Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7811@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7812
7813@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7814@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7815@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7816@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7817You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7818specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7819If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7820@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7821@end table
7822
793c5807
NC
7823@node GNU Free Documentation License
7824@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7825@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7826
370b66a1
CD
7827@node LD Index
7828@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7829
7830@printindex cp
7831
7832@tex
7833% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7834% meantime:
7835\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7836\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7837\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7838\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7839\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7840\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7841\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7842\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7843\page\colophon
7844% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7845@end tex
7846
252b5132 7847@bye
This page took 1.484452 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.